Home

Dodge 2008 Ram 1500 Automobile User Manual

1. 180 322 HighBeam kx e RR Ed ERES 135 176 Traction Control 6 6 0 eee 300 High Beam Indicator 06 176 Tuzn Sipnial ice es athe tie are ete 80 134 174 High Beam Low Beam Select 135 Vanity Mior i2 s goa kai a debe s Re ER n 88 Instrument Cluster socs tectis atacan 131 172 Voltage ced eb EAE EE RE EGS 173 Intensity Control 0 0000 136 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 172 InteriOE ace 8s Ravens oe elbows oS 8 PE 135 145 Load Leveling System 0004 164 TICES 2 0 3 eed edere wh ae 426 Loading Vehicle llle 340 341 Lights On Reminder less 133 Capacities cu oder vated eq Yd e ues 341 Low uel 2 26 e Res 182 TIES ub sab qna d bassa dace d 306 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 189 TEOGKS oz vue RPM CREER EN 29 Map Reading sees 135 145 Auto Unlock 2 ses ted eser oe esa 31 en INDEX Automatic Door 1 sp peapa e a ee 30 Child Protection 0 0 00 cee eee nee 33 DOOE aeu Oe ER ER RR Ee Ee 29 Power Door l l 30 Low Tire Pressure System cassinos 322 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren GAT CED gt 3st duties on peg alee ER a I nn ing 71 72 Lubrication Body 2s cbr Paneer aos 392 Lumbar Support 622 e egne See he ae ems 126 Maintenance Free Battery o sescca anaa giesa s 389 Maintenance General 00000000 385 Maintenance Procedures 00000 005 385 Mai
2. 154 Console Features 0000 159 Venting Sunroof Express 154 Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 Sunshade Operation isse 154 Split Folding Rear Seat 161 Wind Buffeting E 154 Bl Rear Window Features 163 Sunroof Maintenance MPO 155 Rear Window Defroster 163 Ignition Off Operation s aaa asaan 155 Load Eeveling gysten It EQII BD stni nee ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the dimming feature is activated mirror clean
3. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped WARNINGI Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to convex mirror will look smaller and farther away resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full than they really are Relying too much on your forward full rearward and normal a passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Driver Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside rearview mirror 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob
4. 20 21 22 Rear Power Distribution Center There is also trunk under contains fuses and relays a power distribution center located in the the spare tire access panel This center Opening The Access Panel 81344fb9 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure s 3 us When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated e may result in a dangerous electrical system over Rear Power Distribution Center load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD 8 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec Yellow Blue tor DLC Wireless Con 2 40Amp Integrated Power Mod trol Module WCM Green ule IPM Wireless Ignition Node 3 ER WIN 4 40Amp Integrated Power Mod 2 v D ay PowerLite Yellow Green ule IPM 5 30 Amp Heated Seats if 1B P
5. 332 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 337 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 339 268 STARTING AND OPERATING M Mi Vehicle Loading sese 340 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Vehicle Certification Label 340 U a fa hike bab Sala nae d Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 340 Trailer And Tongue Weight 347 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 340 Towing Requirements 348 Overloading err E EE Ee E EY 341 E e E E 998 Loading edes outs eris tard ipis pde 4 m cure id Bie ees T la Trailer Towing 2o RR RR 342 Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive 354 Common Towing Definitions 342 Trailer Hitch Classification 344 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in
6. He NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side Reist to ugonpeci phone i Sections of the unit s faceplate Clock Setting Procedure The REN and RER radios contain a CD DVD player USB uconnect gps RER only port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The mm for easy menu selection satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your uconnect tunes REN or RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition V Tn os Menage System VR If Equipped 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The Section 3 clock setting menu will appear on the screen 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where
7. 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 11 4 Quarts 10 8 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 14 7 Quarts 13 9 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 15 1 Quarts 14 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 2 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for cor rect SAE grade Engine Oil 3 5L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for cor rect SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for cor rect SAE grade Spark Plugs 2 7L Engine TE10MCC5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 3 5L Engine ZFR5LP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark
8. CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels 288 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
9. Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the di
10. Fuses 4 224 253 6 56 0485 bouts IE 411 Integrated Power Module 411 Rear Power Distribution Center 413 H Vehicle Storage eese 418 ll Replacement Light Bulbs 418 B Bulb Replacement sso ees Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Park Turn Light And Front Side Marker Light Models With Halogen Headlights Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight And Park Turn Light Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID Backup Light Side Marker Light Tail Turn Light And Tail Stop Light License Light i5 ecte scsi 9 RP e eS Bl Fluids And Capacities Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 419 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 7L 10 9 8 7 6 5 81c6cbbe 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L Bic ccOe 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Engine Coolant Res
11. High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the multifunction lever is released Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent t0 8125e174 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the h
12. hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch clear water metal and painted surfaces e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug if and Tar BERE ep OVE e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains a month and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing and open that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If
13. or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power WINDOW switches radio uconnect phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears AWD System Displays When in this display you may select ON or OFF When ON is selected the EVIC displays the current mode of the transfer case A five second display appears any time the transfer case changes from All Wheel Drive AWD to Rear Wheel Drive RWD or from RWD to AWD The EVIC also displays the current mode of the transfer case when you shift into drive or reverse To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the uconnect system are confirmed To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the
14. 000000 H If You Need Assistance uu xasceenxs em eek es 451 W Reporting Safety Defects ee n Chrysler LLC Customer Center 452 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 452 Rept tian decer ae hides In Mexico Contact s sas s mecra daaa seana 452 DECONADE wpoquliequbesesdaqisdaie 455 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Wi Publication Order Forms 455 Traction Grades 2 ike ee 457 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades issus 458 Quality Grades i scs cet y Ra 457 Treadwear eee 457 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service ad
15. 294 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 399 Adding Fuel eres reri bo erg ees ee send es 337 Adding Washer Fluid 0 005 393 Additives Fuel 12k 3 eae rere 335 Adjustable Pedals 0 000000 s eee 140 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 389 Air Conditioner Maintenance 391 Air Conditioning sse celu 253 255 Air Conditioning Controls 253 Air Conditioning Filter sss ssas seara sisss 262 392 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 263 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 391 392 Air Conditioning System 253 255 256 391 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 cee eee 311 PDAS oi ERE 52 Airbag Deployment 0050 59 62 Airbag Light 00004 60 65 79 175 Airbag Maintenance aua na ann 00000 64 Aitbag Side e eee 54 60 Airbag Window Side Curtain 54 60 Alatm Panie 3 290844 ike Ree Gao Pow wb S02 24 Alarm Security Alarm 18 180 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 All Wheel Drive AWD sse 286 405 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio less 243 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 398 399 427 Disposal seasan tec Haken de GbR eS 400 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 294 296 Anti Lock Warning Light llus 182 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearan
16. CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a C
17. NEUTRAL In NEUTRAL no power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed Do not engage NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The engine may be started in this range Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold
18. Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Replace the spark plugs 2 7L and 5 7L Engines Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing AII Wheel Drive AWD Replace the accessory drive belt 2 7L 3 5L Engines Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter r
19. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION ier toe nm 9 oa note uon AUS Roe Rs ie 9 8 c9
20. e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the aem user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL contro
21. ur speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE Ifthe vehicle requires towing make sure all four Towie pues Cooling Spaen wheels are off the ground To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods put transmission in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS WM Hazard Warning Flasher 356 H If Your Engine Overheats 356 H Jacking And Tire Changing 357 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 358 Preparations For Jacking 360 Jacking And Changing a Tire 360 Compact Spare Tire 6 llle 366 Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation IE EQuUIpped se cmm 366 WM Jump Starting Procedures 369 H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 04 Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 5 rie acne ee 374 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 00040 375 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument pan
22. 1 Airbags any way 2 Knee Bolsters Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal etc regulations that allow less forceful deployment 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle may also be equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbags If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG Window Airbag NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat mounted side airbags they are marked with an SRS label sewn into the outboard side of the seat e If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not use acces sory seat covers or place objects between you and the seat airbags the performance could be ad versely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not attach cupholders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating seat airbag could driv
23. 344 STARTING AND OPERATING M of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of tra
24. API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by suppleme
25. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 81351e5e Power Sunroof Controls ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in will open automatically from any position The sunroof the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat will open fully and then stop automatically This is called tended children can become entrapped by the Express Open During Express Open operation any power sunroof while operating the power sunroof movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun Pinch Protect Feature E roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or This feature will detect an obstruction in th
26. Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Without Vehicle Entertainment System VES Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest 1 Release button for bottom compartment 2 Release button for top compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment You can access this compartment directly without first exposing the upper compartment by oper ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins A slot in the left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptop s cellular phones or other electrical equipment The con sole s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments With Vehicle Entertainment System VES The cent
27. This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER REN REP REW or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection
28. WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation If Equipped NOTE Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 1 Mount the road tire on the axle For vehicles equipped with wheel covers perform Steps 2 and 3 For vehicles equipped with center caps proceed to Step 4 2 Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 2 Valve Notch 5 Mounting Stud 3 Wheel Lug Nut 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME
29. and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owners Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be
30. by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata Artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current play
31. on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and th
32. or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a handheld radio RKE transmitter with integrated key The RKE transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the RKE transmitter with integrated key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 81c6782c RKE Transmitter with Integrated Key To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the
33. supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Art
34. tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light en STARTING AND OPERATING 325 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 5 The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the 74 instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Th
35. to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob
36. when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking and Changing a Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Continued WARNING Continued Never start or run the engine with the vehicle ona jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361 A 69 3 7 Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sg 2 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum WARNING wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before covers w
37. windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel I NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the switch will operate a Trunk Release Button 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicleby TRUNK SAFETY WARNING pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds With the ignition switch in the ON position the Trunk Do not allow children to have access to the trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster either by climbing into the trunk from outside or indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display through the inside of the vehicle Always close the will reappear once the trunk is closed trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat str
38. 00 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 146 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 en INDEX 479 Transporting Pets cine a ea gia cae a ea Sie eae are 77 Tread Wear Indicators 00 00 316 Trip Odometer o m Rb OR RR bade 172 177 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 222 2 39 41 Trunk Release Emergency n n nananana nnna 41 Trunk Release Remote Control 39 Tutt Signal iude s dept er de dnte es 134 174 UCIConmnectOf 2444 2450 tiud aiea enira bade 236 uconnect Hands Free Phone 89 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 457 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 236 Universal Transmitter 00000 146 Unleaded Gasoline 00000000 332 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 48 Vanity Mirrors 6 ee 88 Variance Compass as e a ai ae aiea na ee 191 Vehicle Certification Label 340 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 0 306 340 341 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage s 6 oec rn 262 418 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video SyStem cus tantu dade Sarees Gary CX HER als waa 248 Viscosity Engine Oil s serra Ren 387 Voice Recognition System VR 117 Warning Flasher Hazard 4 356 Warning Ligh
39. 139 E Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 140 H Electronic Speed Control 141 To Activate 1a aaro anre genre ee 142 To Set At A Desired Speed 142 To Deactivate 23e em t 142 To Resume Speed 000 143 To Vary The Speed Setting 143 To Accelerate For Passing Bl Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Sunglasses Storage 00000 145 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 146 Programming HomeLink 147 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 150 Using HomeLink9 2o 150 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button 00 151 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips 00 151 Sunroof Fully Closed 0 0 155 General Information 1522 Wi Electrical Power Outlets 0 04 155 H Power Sunroof If Equipped 152 WP Cupholders 42552 or rapa 158 Opening Sunroof Express 153 Front Seat Cupholders 158 Closing Sunroof Express 153 Rear Seat Cupholders s essas irssi asise 159 Pinch Protect Feature 2euicaued rs n ees 153 W St rage cesses cyte eke s OE 159 Pinch Protect Override
40. 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn o
41. A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 340 STARTING AND OPERATING M VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 WARNING Because the front wheels
42. ASSISTANCE M acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pave
43. Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Battery Location WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Continued CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
44. An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time CAUTION e To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Wi Instrument Panel Features 169 Wi Instrument Cluster Base 170 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 171 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 172 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped ee e EE RO 183 Electronic V
45. Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO A position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO A position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while
46. EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the security alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold th
47. Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Inspect the transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes DL L C C C DO DUO M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 O O C LOLDLDALD6L 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires m Replace the spark pl
48. Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc ture or frame Continued WARNING Continued e You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval The light flickers or comes on and r
49. NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Alwa
50. Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Oil Filter 2 7L 3 5L and 5 7L En MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 04884899AB or equivalent gines Fuel Selection 2 7L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 3 5L and 5 7L En 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended gines Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid Front Axle API GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Transfer Case MOPAR P N 68049954AA BW 44 40 Transfer Case Lubricant MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 432 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 432 COMmreomMm zon mMo2Zzr2zamazZz reZz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed
51. Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry e After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion ores ne HHONE Daven RP beet e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say language is deleted ERUUERGOIS Delete e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will deleted or edited then be
52. Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Low Tire Pressure SERVICE AWD SYSTEM All Wheel Drive AWD system is not functioning properly and service is required Channel Transmit Channel Training Channel Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train Insert Key Turn To Run refer to Remote Starting System in Section 2 Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 Oil Change Required with a single chime Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message tem
53. Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insertthe tip of the valet key or similar object into the child lock control and pull it downward oe Child Lock Control ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows UE ee ae m e Power Window Switches T
54. The compass will now function normally es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 15 040506040 1 Tur
55. a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth St
56. and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 455 a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Cana
57. any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 3 5L and 5 7L Engines The 3 5L and 5 7L engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and perfor mance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformul
58. assembly and install the replacement bulb 10 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly and then turn it clockwise 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Reinstall the tail light assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner 12 Close the trunk License Light 1 Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 818db273 1 License Light Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the light to the rear fascia and then install the Screws ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 2 7 Liter Engine 18 Gallons 68 Liters 3 5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive 18 Gallons 68 Liters 3 5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive 19 Gallons 72 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 0 Quarts 5 7 Liters 3 5 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified 6 0 Quarts 5 7 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 0 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 2 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 9 9 Quarts 9 4 Liters Formula 3 5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive MOPAR Antifreeze 11 1 Quarts 10 5 Liters Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula
59. body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chryslertl C 81 2260920 Secon ition et Printed in U S A p 99 SA G ND eem e T M S EE NOE arc CN dr D 2
60. brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade es STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position REVERSE Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com pletely stopped
61. cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e If the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward
62. cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Gas Cap Tether Hook ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started
63. cloth e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ing Don t lean over battery when attaching ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water ignition switch is ON You can be hurt by the fan Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Continued A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as wat
64. display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 6 DISC MP3 WMA 042005200 REQ Radio 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch
65. dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Towing English Redial Assistance Emergency Espanol Phonebook Francais Last See Number Phonebook on Phone is redialed Flowchart UConnect Tutorial See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Phonebook Entries Li
66. electrolyte in a discharged E 1 2 battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting jump start Jump Starting 1 Engine Ground 2 Positive Battery Post 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery Let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery NOTE Refer to Synchronizing ESP under Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 if the ESP BAS light in 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME the instrument cluster remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion e Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and DRIVE Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motio
67. engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly result in engine damage and may decrease corro dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals am j specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Selection of Coolant possible Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built
68. ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt electrical outlets on this vehicle 3 Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package has power available only when the ignition is ON This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If desired the power outlet next to the ash The center console outlet is powered directly from the receiver tray if equipped can be converted by your battery power available at all times Items plugged into authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent switch in the LOCK position engine starting Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure p
69. equipped System Status and Personal Settings Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system con trol Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 A v SCROLL Button D AUDIO MODE Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass reading and outside temperature this screen will display radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle Refer to Remote Sound System Con trols in this section Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal
70. exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your CAUTION vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer 9 Turn Signal Indicators Pops back ud ira nb E me ies amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal ee ee when the turn signal lever is operated engine OFF immediately and call for service NOTE e Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 10 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first N turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will T sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature
71. have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 312 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind wh
72. is critically hot If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos sible Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The yellow Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indi cator Light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running The system will turn this light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both ESP BAS 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound
73. line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressin
74. local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section STARTING AND OPERATING 347 which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side 057003767 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed
75. memo During the recording you may press the VR button to stop record ing You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup 3 To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Language Italian e Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial e Voice Training 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recogni tion 2 Repeat the words and phrases
76. of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When you press the VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your
77. of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued WARNING Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standin
78. or alike While pressing the override move the shift lever out of the PARK position When complete return the rubber tray to its original position 4 Speed Automatic Transmission NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only 2nd gear operation Normal op eration will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 5 WARNING Shift Lever Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis Gear Ranges sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking b
79. pressed then the Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive mode will change i e from AM to FM to Media mode display which is located in the instrument cluster etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle The VOLUME button controls the sound level When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp of the sound system Press the top of the Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT VOLUME button to increase the sound level button to operate various radio media and VOL Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to FUNC Universal Customer Interface UCI functions UME decrease the sound level TION ie advance presets select next folder jump to Button SELECT or start playing songs in playlists etc depend Button ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the D Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information A When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek MODE v up and down radio stations tracks chapters Button SCROLL files etc depending on which radio is in the Button vehicle equipped with UCI 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cl
80. pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the uconnect lan guage selection Refer to Language Selection under aconnect phone in Section 3 Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release t
81. protect you in another colli sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning e Cuts off fuel to the engine Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the e Flashes hazard lights airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Unlocks the doors automatically NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven
82. shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for information on this system ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends
83. snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft Ib 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 7 For vehicles equipped with center caps install the center cap by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap 8 Stow the jack tools and spare tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or
84. some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 You also may experience the following when the brake WARNING system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output e The clicking sound of solenoid valves radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e Brake pedal pulsations and bility Installation of such equipment should be e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end performed by qualified professionals of the stop Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS Continued 296 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent the natura
85. system ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 CAUTION JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the Continued hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used
86. system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transf
87. the currently displayed func tion gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Automatic All Wheel Drive AWD Displays If Equipped Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature wheel slip or other predetermined condi tions when the vehicle automatically transitions from RWD to AWD the EVIC will display the following message for five seconds 041005941 Rear Wheel Drive RWD to All Wheel Drive AWD 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When the vehicle automatically transitions from AWD to RWD the EVIC will display the following message for five seconds 041005942 All Wheel Drive AWD to Rear Wheel Drive RWD Refer to All Wheel Drive If Equipped in Section 5 for more information on the All Wheel Drive AWD system Compass Display a5 The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight com COM pass readings and the outside temperature PASS Button Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off
88. the ground unless the rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in NEUTRAL Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL under the following conditions e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h CAUTION Exceeding these towing limits may cause transmis sion failure Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the ground or the rear driveshaft removed with no limita tion on speed or distance CAUTION e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 CAUTION Continued Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly e If the transmission is not operative or if the The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 24 km vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck Otherwise damage to the trans mission may result Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If you must use the accessories wiper
89. the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Delay Turning Head lights Off under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is built into the head light switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either pres
90. the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster e In List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 CAUTION Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cau
91. the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INS
92. transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential The exterior surface of these compo nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid fill inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the fill inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole Use this plug to add fluid as required 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachmen
93. vehicle will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck led up in the rear seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 2 Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section 3 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 4 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section 5 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it
94. webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restr
95. when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in Section 7 15 High Beam Light This light will turn on when the high beam 777 headlights are ON Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving 17 Shift Lever Indicator This indicator shows the automatic transmission shift lever selection 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light will turn on when the front fog lights are ON ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 19 OdometerlTrip Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify the mileage the vehicle has been driven Ther
96. with Remote Start ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 How to Use Remote Start To Enter Remote Start Mode All of the following conditions must be met before the Press and release the REMOTE START button engine will remote start 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the s Hoodi dosed Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e Trunk closed NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during e Hazard switch off Remote Start mode e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e For security power window and power sunroof op e Ignition key removed from ignition switch T QU when tho vehicle 1 M A a e The engine can be started two consecutive times two e RKE PANIC button not pressed 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote S
97. with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coo
98. with side impact option detects a collision requiring the front seat mounted side airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front seat mounted side airbag The inflat ing front seat mounted side airbag pushes through the seam in the seat s trim cover and opens into the space ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 between the occupant and the door The airbag inflates at a very high speed and with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the front seat mounted side airbag inflates This especially ap plies to children The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not make any modifications to the front seat components assembly or to the seat cover in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being re paired Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint sys tem SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar W
99. you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following pro cedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus ter this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Lo tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the EVIC Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTR
100. your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in 75 mph 120 km h the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
101. 2 0 0 0 ee eee 388 Recommendation Ln 387 427 DY MENU C marie ea stel eun doeet ae Gre 4 BY a 388 Viscosity Oil Filter Changes i es es p denies RE any aes 388 Oil Filter Selection llle 388 Onboard Diagnostic System 382 383 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 146 Operating Precautions oc oea seneni EaR 382 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 86 Overdrive wio ae crinii eae bed doR ed deg 4 278 Overhead Console ss essa as Ees maa a SEa a 145 Overheating Engine 253 esnias 174 356 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 455 Paint Care seses sve e pr e ERE GE ea 406 Panic Alari cese ed yu dc esa os 24 Parking Brake 2 ee 292 Passing light bees cae Ret Ren 135 Pedals Adjustable iccrsssi sass 140 Personal Settings 24 ce aed ca shee ads cad ae 193 lu PET 77 en INDEX 473 Phone Cellular eese 89 Phone Hands Free uconnect 5 89 Placard Tire and Loading Information 306 Power Deck Lid Release 000 00 39 Distribution Center Fuses 411 Door Locks serren kurt bee eee eae ee ee as 30 MIFfOIS 1 43 3k ond e bey oR GU Ra E eps 88 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 155 Seats dus qtd der bi Se a oa E SUE CORR edo d 124 STEGTE au ius dera dee dub E RR e dee d 291 Sunroof ira raare ieri enire RE PRA PS 152 WindOWS 24
102. 2 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 435 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se M A nn ______ZZZZ L ee E M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service d 18 Months Maintenance Schedule N Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M Change the engine oil and engine oil A Rotate tires N filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Ml Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary E iim Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the d Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped front axle fluid All Wheel Drive J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary S AWD d Inspect the CV joints C Inspect exhaust system H LJ Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary E D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 30 000 Miles 50 000 km 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Wheel Drive AWD E or 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires R
103. 22 44 36er irere Gad ee dae 246 Spare Tite kaa a n aeons aeons MS 313 314 358 Spark Plugs is hea e rhe bes 429 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 0 0 eee eee 429 Qul cu cae Rubens a tene ERE ade eis 429 Speed Control Cruise Control 141 Speedometer reseau dre en ae 172 Star ng x6 b Gc ee err E PRAE 26 269 Automatic Transmission clus 269 Emergency Jump Starting 369 Engine Fails to Start esir sesgura susirgs 271 REMOTE y Eae RU RE ERE a Stee eH 26 Starting and Operating 0 269 Starting Procedures iiis 269 Steering Column Controls llle 134 Columrn Lock sey aiias n RR RESTER 139 Power cartoni ererig oe PS E ER a 291 THE COMMA iude eg ncn RR AS 3 139 Wheel Dile ace nas aon Baw aes med 139 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls recercas aiiis ee 250 DIOFABE casas Saad eh ee De een ee 159 418 Storage Vehicle c00c tde niese iare to be 262 418 storing Your Vehicle i c ER 418 Stuck Freeing 53i eed 50046 eee ER Ee 372 Sun Roof zz 0643 09 9 LEE Gee SS Ox xs 152 Sunglasses Storage llle 145 Sunroof Maintenance l l lesen 155 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 52 Sway Control Trailer 2 0 0 0 0000040 343 Synthetic Engine Oil 2 2 388 System Remote Starting 00 0 26 en INDEX 477 Tachometer 2s eee m oe oe ee ias 172 Telescoping Steering Column 139 Tempera
104. 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL cont
105. 4544 8acuee rReERRESF RS 35 Power Steering Fluid 000040 430 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 51 Preparation for Jacking 0 06 360 Pretensioners Seat BeltS uccide Sce UR Ee a 49 Programmable Electronic Features 193 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 20 Radial Ply Lites i220 RIRs Ren 313 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 400 Radio Operation sese sec ex ee be E ahes 252 Radio Remote Controls 000005 250 Radio Satellite uconnect gps 241 247 Rear Cupholder y area regt RR ERR 159 Rear Seat Folding 5 s ere de kasas 128 Rear Window Defroster l l 163 Rear Window Features 0 0000 eee 163 Rearview Mirrors 0 0000 eee eee 85 Reclining Front Seats 000005 124 Recorder Event Data 0000000008 65 Recreational Towing 0000000 354 Reformulated Gasoline 00 0085 333 Refrigerant 2 egal pee UAR RE 3OeP ae 392 Release Hood 1 0 aeni apa a 129 10 47 4 INDEX M Reminder Lights On 000050 133 Reminder Seat Belt 00 0000 0 49 Remote Control Starting System ire asc onera t s 26 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 250 Remote Starting System llle 26 Remote Trunk Release lessen 39 Replacement Bulbs seese iauga aah e
106. 5 386 Power 5teernmpg saueaceusis ES eae sig aaa 291 Transfer Case 0 ee es 405 ETiidS 2 0i ace teas ow ested wih a ate eo edu ee 429 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 429 Fog Lights 2k re bs 133 176 Folding Rear Seat ssec ers kd 128 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 06 372 Fuel sence genoa r3 ER Ge WR ele eo Gu deed 332 Adding yo oe cae es VER EEG a er REE ee a 337 Additives seriero erara na ee eee 335 Clean Af iis ream eo Sate ott ba px Oe ees 333 Bth nol 4222 sca ae oe Pe ER vx 333 Filler Cap Gas Cap isses 337 G solin Geiss scc bd FO RO EG Ex 332 en INDEX 467 Ga g iaces tule ORB RUE Ca ee Rem E 172 Materials Added llle 335 Methanol sk rum 4x rR3R RSS 333 Octane Rating 9 e ta 332 429 Requirements a aea saadaa es c Do 332 Specifications cce sr ba ew E Reds 429 Tank Capacity cest ege xus de we ears 427 Fuel System Caution 0000000000 338 Fueling lt iex ok ee nt eri Ora el RR eh Aas 337 FUSES 2ec esep Rr ek EE OR EASE bee en ER IA 411 Garage Door Opener Homelink9 146 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 337 382 Gasoline Clean Air llle 333 Gasoline Reformulated 333 Gauges Coolant Temperature 00 173 Fuel usum eee Ss 3G ERE 172 Odometer cce 177 Speedometer ps iors sav MIRA RE CHR ed 172 Tachometer sese 172 Gear Ranges al eas ERRARE esas 277 282 General In
107. 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Normal Starting Tip Start 270 WW AutoStick If Equipped Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 272 AutoStick Operation 00 0 Bl Automatic Transmission 273 W All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 286 General Information 273 W Driving On Slippery Surfaces 287 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 275 Acceleration x pa ee pes 287 Brake Transmission Interlock Manual TracHhom c ENERETITOETETITISTRTTTETI 288 Override 2 uet Sb ee ado ete Rea 275 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Bi Driving Through Water 0 288 ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And Flowing Rising Water o u uo 289 ESP TCS Indicator Light 300 Shallow Sending Waer 2occescetiocses 289 H Tire Safety Information 301 E Power Steering 4 4 ews de eh Ra 291 pau M ee ete a Power Steering Fluid Check 291 Tine Heg canon Number THN aciei digo ene W Parking Brake 0 eee eevee 292 tite Loading Gne THC PISO eine aes 906 B Anti Lock Brake System 00 05 Dui A epee 2 H Electronic Brake Control System 296 TIS PRUE Se ieee ee g ences ate dia 940 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 296 Tire Inflation P
108. ARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel p
109. ARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front seat assembly its related components or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag de ployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 However if you haven t healed significantly within a WARNING few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed airbags can t
110. Additional Transmitters 24 Wi Trunk Safety Warning 05 40 Transmitter Battery Service 25 Trunk Emergency Release 41 General Information 26 W Occupant Restraints esos ma 41 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 26 Lap Shoulder Belts 0000 42 How To Use Remote Start 27 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 48 W Door Locks osea wa sao REP Cees RR YEA 29 Seat Belt Pretensioners uos ses e n 49 Manual Door Locks sssss 29 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System caca a ois 30 Belt Alerte Lug Dess kama aes 49 Child Protection Door Lock 33 Auman Locking Mode M IIR EDEN ss al B Windows accusa ke odo 35 SCAT PENS ANEA PETAN WOMEN sarias is Bots N E e Eas e p e 35 Seat Belt Extender 0 52 Wind Buffeting ii Se B Trunk Lock And Release 39 Event Data Recorder EDRI ecrin 65 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Child Restraints 000 200 0000 67 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ll Engine Break In Recommendations 77 VERE fing I EL d Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make W Safety Tips e reiiisiiisetarere rii taniis 78 Outside The Vehicle L L LL Transporting Passengers 05 78 Exhaust Gas ze abe soe aged anak EREN 78 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOU
111. D Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly
112. HICLE M CAUTION CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque Automatic Transmission converter shudder Using a transmission fluid Fluid Level Check other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not TUS pco changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu required For this reason the dipstick is omitted Pp ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
113. IRES IF EQUIPPED Never use a tire with a smaller load index or A non hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner capacity other than what Was originally equipped liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0 19 in 5 mm to on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load minimize the loss of air pressure This contributes to the index could result in tire overloading and failure safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob You could lose control and have an accident ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire Continued CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 TIRE CHAINS CAUTION Continued Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain de ees manufacturer In addition only install tire chains on that only chains in good condition are used Bro P215 65 R17 and P225 60 R18 size tires The P245 45 ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use R20 size tires do not provide adequate clearance for tire chains NOTE Do not use tire c
114. It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the 300 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESP on again by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS Malfunction ESP BAS Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked
115. L lt and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle w set the Mode control to Recirculate lt with A C on and roll up the windows O Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel __ or Bi Level lt 7 gp x with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel 7 and turn on A C If it s cloudy or vat dark set the Mode control to Bi Level lt 4 with A C on Adjust Temperature Q Te control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost S END CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and 06 TOt Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear Wi Voca COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 14 In very cold weather if if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor S jor pill Defrost Sig as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 81352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 0 0 269 4 Speed Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission 269
116. Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 25 2208 10 56 48 40 39 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not
117. NDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stati
118. NEL Se Wi Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped ces cr ceed t e 248 ll Remote Sound System Controls 250 E CD DVD Maintenance 252 Wi Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 252 Bl Climate Controls sees 253 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating SYStEM esie eee eee Ra eg a ea 253 Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped 524 2 ea ka 256 Operating Tips seta tai ai ee ra es nn 261 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Bicb3idb 1 Air Outlet 7 Climate Control 13 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Heated Seat Switch 14 Trunk Release Switch 3 Hazard Switch 9 Power Outlet 15 Headlight Switch 4 Electronic Stability Program OFF Button 10 Ash Tray f Equipped Traction Control System OFF Button 5 Glove Compartment 11 Storage Compartment 6 Radio 12 Ignition Switch 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 8190558e UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 81905592 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Trip Odome
119. NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the air conditioning control button while in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request ing the air conditioning is not necessary The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the recirculation con trol button will temporarily put the system in Recirculation mode 10 minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the indicator in the control button to UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 illuminate After 10 minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the indicator will turn off NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured inte rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system wil
120. No function 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For uconnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to aconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 AM FM CD DVD RADIO RER REN IF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If EQUIPPED Equipped
121. OG LAMP taal DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING DEFROST SEATED TOWER AR OUT FT CONTROL ngwF fii F G Tow EA ul W 5 f D HAUL BATTERY HEATED MIRROR a PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR L DECK AIR CONDITIONING mECOC DON WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING BUTTON 4 w e G v c L 9A amp GLOW PLUG WINDSHIELD WIPER SDE AREAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY Lentet GRD TEIMER TOR UCONNECT HAZARD POUR WHEEL STE RAG F FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON ORIVE LOW SRS X cy B E areae AV2 LE e m MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO 010505550 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehi
122. ON Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These practices can cause overheating and damage to the transmis sion Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considered a normal condition Pulling the shift lever into the 3 position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a normal condition and it will not cause damage to the transmission T
123. Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win dows if equipped Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags if equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 e Seat Belt Reminder Light e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How the Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will not detect rollover e For vehicles so equipped the ORC also determines if a side impact is severe enough to deploy the supple mental side curtain airbag and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbag as required for each type of impact e The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and they will
124. R VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the igni tion switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Fob with Integrated Key The Fob with Integrated Key FOBIK operates the igni tion switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the Fob The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead The valet key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the Fob slide the mechani cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other hand 81c67821 Valet Key Removal
125. RNING NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness B Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident 352 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 057003766 4 Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground US S LAC Mo od 057003765 7 Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes en STARTING AND OPERATING 353 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating
126. SUPR CR Sae VL8 c8 eon ieee 6 8 C9 Beales ae 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ce cccecccccccccccccccce 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee ccc ccc tnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece ccc ccc ccccceccreccececs 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc eer cece r cee r ewer hh m hh E e WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES 2 ccc cece ccc c ccc c nec c eee hh hh hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 44359945999 99359949 v 24S vy ST ESO TET T ades 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cc ccc recs rece rece rece r cere seer eens eee reenees 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece cece cer cece eee hh hh hn 10 INDEX 4 hum ER E RE HEU RR QU e o9 E94 8 01 BEG A9 AURA Ku P o aeons ique tedas INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction 0 0 a 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 004 6 4 INTRODUCTION EN INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyabl
127. Seat 24 ode baad PPE eS a doe we SA 42 79 Body Mechanism Lubrication 392 B Pillar Location secre n 306 Brake Assist System 297 Brake Control System Electronic 296 Brake Fluid osse RR eee oases xS 430 Brake Parking sie Sirie e eR 292 Brake System e o RE a ao ene 402 10 462 INDEX ME Anti Lock ABS 2 2 0 00 eee 294 Fluid Check 2 0 0 0 00000 cee eee 403 430 Master Cylinder 0000050 403 Parking 4 ke ree RR aeg oe 292 Warming Light s RR 179 Brakesc Lusit eer ane a Pane eh EN Re eue 402 Brake Transmission Interlock 275 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 77 Brightness Interior Lights 136 Bulb Replacement 24cm reme 418 419 B lbs Light os oos tere eit EUR bur 80 418 Calibration Compass 0 00000 eee 191 Capacities Fluid sawrus cae ant ae RR 427 Caps Filler Fuels hog a cus acaeg ead be ae oR 337 Oil Engine i222 RR ER a eee sass 387 Power Steering osa rosate aiia ia OE Aa 291 Radiator Coolant Pressure 400 Car Washes aco REO a es 407 Carbon Monoxide Warning 78 336 Cargo Vehicle Loading 05 340 Cellular Phone 0 00000 rtr ai 89 252 Certification Label 0 0 0 0 002 ee ee 340 Chains Tte 3 ates had ea eh aod Sane CE ee es 319 Changing A Plat Tite ace gk ae enm x eed 357 Chart Dre Sizing 4 225 RP Rd AG Reda 303 Check Engi
128. TING Se NOTE e For the following example the combined weight of e The following table shows examples on how to calcu occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities 392 kg of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 309 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 lbs 865 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs Bitaddit 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the rec
129. TRUMENT PANEL 215 Changing the Time Zone SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on CAOCCA the screen GI DL 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 042305232 RES Radio 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK B
130. The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust syst
131. UMENT PANEL 179 Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section for more information 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which ch
132. When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over mmm load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Loading loss of control poor performance or damage to Information placard brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen 2 GTW sion chassis structure or tires 3 GAWR e Safety chains must always be used between your l vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the This requirement may limit the ability to always chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a slack for turning corners percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires G
133. Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Emergency Deck Lid Release en INDEX 465 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 372 Hazard Warning Flasher 356 Jacking i bk E Ree dore Spe ee dons 357 Jump Starting oss ce eden oe oae 369 Ovetrheablinig sou tenes etre ERROR ea d 356 TOWING a biete Sas e aure d RR dba 374 Emergency Trunk Release llle 41 Emission Control System Maintenance 383 432 Engine xke redeat PES 379 380 381 Air Cleaner usus ordo x RC diet ue 389 Block Heater elles 272 Break In Recommendations 77 Checking Oil Level 00 385 386 Compartment sese 379 380 381 Coolant Antifreeze 000 397 429 COONS adpan oa saan Od eee dg ede s 397 Exhaust Gas Caution 05 78 336 Fails to Start llle 271 Flooded Starting llecoeeees 271 Fuel Requirements 0000040 332 Jump Starting soc eer RECHTE 369 Oil 2 bass See Sas ee PEOR ES 385 427 429 Oil Change Interval 177 186 386 Oil Mill
134. adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Chil
135. afety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S desi
136. ain REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lights WsW Rear Compartment Trunk Light 562 Overhead Console Reading Lights 578 Visor Vanity Lights 05 A6220 Glove Box Light 0 see sadas eee 194 Door Courtesy 4 kesehhbieneve RR Re 562 Shift Indicator Light 5 eerte JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder Lighting LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlight Standard Halogen 9006 Low Beam Headlight High Intensity Discharge HID isses D1 S Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlight 0 9005 Front Park Turn Light 0 3157A Front Fog Light If Equipped 9145 H10 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Side Marker 2 4 es 605 4456 00450444404 194 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Tail Stop Light 0 00 00 e ae 3057 Tail Turn Eight casei ase Ook es 3057 Rear Side Marker 0 000020 eae 168 backup Light ersed irtira an tee IM E ees 921 Center High Mount Stop Light CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License uci purs RR
137. aints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Refer to information on Air bags in this section Like the front airbags the preten sioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 sec onds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following proce dure NOTE Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors c
138. aking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e
139. al method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bott
140. and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 RES RSC Radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push t
141. ange fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped The Vehicle Security Light flashes rapidly when the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming and slowly when the Vehicle Sec
142. ase llle 129 Ignition 2s suce ke diras eek PE on os ane 13 KEY dne itae er ain eae dota t RACE ae d 12 13 Ignition Key Removal lesse 13 Immobilizer Sentry Key sess 15 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0 0 0 67 68 Information Center Vehicle 05 183 Inside Rearview Mirror sees 85 Instrument Cluster 0 00000 eae 170 172 Instrument Panel and Controls 169 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 410 Interior Appearance Care 004 408 Interior Fuses 2 1 ee 411 Interior Lights 6 0 0 eee eee 135 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 137 Introd ctioh ure Pa SA a SOE AE ARES re ee 4 en INDEX 469 Jack Location me om cca Be CHEER P 358 Jack Operation 6 6 0 eee eee 360 Jacking Instructions 360 Jump Starting e er omen s 369 Key Programming 4 4 cs ea ne ea ewe 17 Key Replacement 2 05 4 xm ss do ardore aos 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 15 Key In Reminder 00000000000 14 Keyless Entry System 4i cess cR io Bb aoe 20 Keys uina a eer and uec a we eser E Ra Re 12 Kicker Sound System 0 000000 0 seus 246 Knee Bolster 0 0 eee eee ee ees 52 Lane Change and Turn Signals 134 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 42 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether lor CHildren i v ec ORE 71 72 Latch Plate oo sed sy aoe ge REX TEE BR OE Pax 44 Lathes e seas im
143. ase it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis Continued charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully If the engine fails to start afte
144. ases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Shou
145. asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List e Press the PHONE button to begin Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry e The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you and say Delete wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to
146. at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine run ning ESP BAS The system will turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles kilome ters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the STARTING AND OPERATING 301 ESP is synchronized refer to Synchronizing ESP see TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Mal function Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings e Each time the ignition switch is turned ON the ESP system will be on even if it was turned off previously e The ESP control system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is NORMAL the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 054903773 1 US DOT S
147. ate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers
148. ated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 334 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light
149. ath Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win Door Lock Plunger dows other controls or move the vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking the key in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open the key is in the ignition and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door L
150. ative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that may be recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable light status if equipped ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cyc
151. ave your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 or under Odometer Trip Odom eter under Instrument Cluster Descriptions in Sec tion 4 At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder powe
152. ay the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specification Sampling 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files
153. ay the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension wn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not pl
154. blished press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can conti
155. button and say uconnect Tutorial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is spe
156. ce Care osos sieraad gaiei eese 406 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assistance Towing 6 0 cece eee eee 103 Auto Down Power Windows sss 36 Auto Unlock Doors sees 31 en INDEX 461 Auto Up Power Windows s sess 37 Automatic Dimming Mirror sss 86 Automatic Door Locks 00005 30 31 Automatic Headlights sss 132 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 177 186 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 256 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives s rledas o b re e 405 Automatic Transmission 276 282 404 405 Adding Fluid 5e re eas 405 430 Twin rM E 286 Fluid and Filter Changes llus 405 Fluid Change acus sien atom ed oes RESET 405 Fluid Level Check llle 404 Fluid Type 4 sess RR as 430 Gear Ranges 0 2 eee eee eee ee 277 282 Ov rdrive vsssecese tse rd ve ERES RES 278 Shifting ee otis has Bia Suche dus 276 282 Special Additives 0 00000 405 Torque Convertet seses reiset deena ea ae 280 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 281 285 Antosik occu nesgeestenesweecaneiwers 286 Axle Fluid 6 56 bo ects roe Ree we ea 430 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 430 Battery m 389 Emergency Starting 6 c reisse ases 369 Jump Starting axem See ho Kae EROR 369 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 LOCatlOb 4 ncs mane Bowe aeons el ACE Por 370 390 Belts
157. ce ex ae eae HR 80 FOO ses iex alee aes aoe eae ee ee aed 129 Lead Free Gasoline 0 0 00 e gineta 332 Leaks Fluid 435 9 34 2 bb Fhe oP PServer a had 80 Life Of Tit S en seda nk anes ele ee Kae RON 316 Light Bulbs zs rr reme s 80 418 Lights dedo axe aure US Orr dps 80 131 AIDag scis cre E sas HR Ed Reed 60 65 79 175 AnttLOck essem cepere RR Rees Automatic Headlights Brake Assist Warning Brake Watning so cessassion miosg Bulb Replacement Courtesy Reading 06 CTUISE 46 5 nd ue dona Beacon haya oet dass Daytime Running llle Dimmer Switch Headlight Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Electronic Throttle Control Warning 470 INDEX aaa Engine Temperature Warning 175 Oil Pressure s wie cites vx y CHA ROS ee ped 176 EXierIOE T sus AG o Ug EX WE e ae ROGA e ced 80 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 136 ln A 133 176 Passing hs nad eate see e tubes does Sues es 135 Hazard Warning Flasher 356 Reading 24 s c3 0050024 be ERR 135 145 Headlight Switch esses 131 Seat Belt Reminder 004 176 Headlights 0 3540 d4eu asta ees 131 422 Servie suse ku hese maned ee ee ds 418 419 Headlights On Reminder 133 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 183 Headlights On With Wipers 132 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS
158. cess Door 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry 2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped
159. chbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine com partment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be Q low the freezing point
160. child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a actly when installing an infant or child restraint child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind A rearward facing child restraint should only be their back used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re NOTE For additional information refer to straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the c
161. cle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in Window Lockout Switch the UP position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Reset Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the AUTO up function will be disabled To reactivate the AUTO up feature perform the following procedure after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
162. cle registration and the title VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN 010805185 a en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ie Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS A Word About Your Keys 5 12 Mi Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 Rearming Of The System 18 FOB With Integrated Key 13 To Arm The System 00 0 18 Ignition Key Removal 13 To Disarm The System llus 19 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 WiRemote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Ea Sentry Key scapes Hew ie SV Erro RRR Y 15 To Unlock The DOOIS 233 za dcr seeders 20 Replacement Keys lille 16 To Lock The Doors e stss braaidag 23 Customer Key Programming 17 To Unlatch The Trunk 24 General Information 18 Using The Panic Alarm 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Programming
163. compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no mat
164. conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing in the Maintenance Schedule Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Autostick If Equipped Byusing the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed 354 STARTING AND OPERATING M Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle MOTORHOME ETC speed may be required to avoid extended driving at Two Wheel Drive and All Wheel Drive high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
165. ctor have a distinctive label on the seat belt webbing The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor Tighten web bing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by de pressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
166. d e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Depress the brake pedal or es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 e Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you to CANCEL Pushing and releasing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the Electronic Speed Control lever in RESUME ACCEL When the Electronic Speed Control lever is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases so tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the E
167. d Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug WARNING as possible e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or
168. d dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of es STARTING AND OPERATING 293 PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner o
169. d easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmati
170. d location help all home 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no uconnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous redial record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation e This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability
171. d then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions
172. d to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 812d1942 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position 045605916 Manual Temperature Controls 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Temperature Control The rotary knob in the center controls air temperature Rotate the control to the left for cooler air temperature and to the right for warmer air tempera ture Rotating the control to the ex treme left provides the coldest setting Rotating the control to the extreme right provides the warmest setting 812d193c Mode Control Lt The rotary knob on the right controls airflow distribution Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the op erator to fine tune airflow distribu tion The mode settings are as follows 045605917 e Defrost Gy Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles NOTE To improve fuel economy leave in defrost only when necessary e Defrost Floor te Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets x and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister gril
173. d until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combina
174. d use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil ity For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for proper coolant selection 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure ad equate system lubrication to mi
175. d with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec
176. da Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC 456 vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to IF YOU NEED CONSUMER
177. delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steeri
178. dentification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans mitters Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank RKE transmitter to the vehicle electronics A blank RKE transmitter is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with you to an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated keys you can program new RKE transmitters to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime
179. designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the b
180. dob order ph RE RE 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Park Turn Light and Front Side Marker Light Models with Halogen Headlights 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem bly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assem bly 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head light assembly and then turn it clockwise 818ec6ba 1 High Beam Headlight Bulb 2 Low Beam Headlight Bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 818ec6c7 818ec6e2 3 Park Turn Light Bulb 4 Side Marker Light Bulb 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlights when the HEADLIGHT switch is Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight and Park Turn Light Models with High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID HID Headlights The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circui
181. e and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pres
182. e UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security alarm Opening a door with the security alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This featu
183. e contains fuses and relays cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Integrated Power Module 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 15 Amp Washer Motor 10 30 Amp Windshield Wiper Blue Pink 2 25 Amp Powertrain Control 11 30Amp Anti Lock Brake System Neutral Module PCM Pink ABS Valves if 3 25 Amp Ignition Run Start equipped Neutral 12 40 Amp Radiator Fan 4 25 Amp Alternator EGR Sole Green Neutral noid 13 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake System 5 Red ABS Pump Motor if 6 z 25 Amp Ignition Coils Injectors equipped Neutral Short Runner Valve 14 7 15 50 Amp Radiator Fan 8 25 Amp Starter Red Neutral 16 9 m 17 18 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 x Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 19
184. e maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to UTE the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Loadi
185. e oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCO CO C O C L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 7L and 5 7L Engines Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on v
186. e opening of any object to project through the sunroof opening the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob Injury may result struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunro
187. e operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 Soe eee us D ELECIRONIC 1ABILITY WATERINFUEL REAR WINDOW WENOSMELDWIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AR HEATED SEAT ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM FAILURE SPFFDCONTRO ASSIST SYSTEM B NO Xt D e x Wa 2 0 BRAKE SYSTEM m 3 ER Y MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM PORA CURE wren D LONER xxi ia WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILI DFSCFNT WARNING PARIONG MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE 2OS Dati dG4f8 83 FUELFILLSDE REARWENDON WINDGHELD WASHER DOMELIGHT FRONTFOGLONT HOCORELEASE LOWERAR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TAchON ALL WHEEL FARURE OF ANTHLOCK oi 3 e 3002 QE C 2j V awp srake nosne UFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW REAR F
188. e shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft Ib 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 psi 414 KPa cold inflation pressure e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h speed
189. e system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 326 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you instal
190. e the object into occupants causing serious injury 8196691 Continued SRS Label Location 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side cur tain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side curtain and seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions For vehicles so equipped the supplemental side curtain airbag and front seat mounted side airbag on the crash side of the
191. e time is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 AUTO Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obsta
192. e you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to 81cb24f3 open only when the airbags are inflating Front Airbag Components Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
193. eadlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the in strument panel lights and if so equipped the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 818c9c32 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving t
194. ed under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats e Bi Level p Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel gt 22 Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning E during manual operation only When the air con ditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 conditioning An indicator in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected NOTE To control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An indicator in the button illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extende
195. ed with All Wheel Drive AWD change the T Adjust parking brake on vehicles D front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or equipped with four wheel disc brakes T frequent trailer towing L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicles esed ee rea x E ens oe eS 451 Speech Impaired TDD TTY Prepare For The Appointment 451 Service Contract cc en Prepare A List ieedoxnee m edo ed ses 451 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only Be Reasonable With Requests 4531 W MOPAR Parts
196. ee To attach a child restraint tether strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the for the strap between the anchor and the child seat seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind Tether Strap Mounting the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook strap 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km
197. efore if the odometer reading is changed because of repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined Rear Wheel Drive RWD All Wheel Drive AWD Displays Base Cluster On vehicles equipped with a Base Instrument Cluster the odometer will display 2drivE when the vehicle is in Rear Wheel Drive RWD and 4drivE when All Wheel Drive AWD is activated If the odometer displays the tCASE warning message after engine start up or during driving the AWD system is not functioning properly and service is required NOTE Vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display SERVICE AWD SYS TEM if the system is not functioning properly and service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in this section for more information Change Oil Message Base Cluster Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Unless reset this message will continue to display each time
198. ehicle Information Center EVIC DiSplays d Shae oath as one ines 185 Oil Change Required 0 186 Trip Functions aeo eee men 187 Automatic All Wheel Drive AWD Displays Jf Equipped l c ben drainer PRA Compass Display sess 190 Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped ss aces eg dete Renan 192 uconnect gps Navigation If Equipped 193 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 0 eee ee eee eee 193 lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX jadi ee aetna ene awe Gc rH none ae 197 166 Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play E AM FM CD DVD Radio RER REN If Equipped is 3s hb ems Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure Bl Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack o oana Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operatio
199. ehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing AII Wheel Drive AWD Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 439 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EM B i 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service n 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Y Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate tires N filter J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the ME Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary E 11 Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped M Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD S 21 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary T Inspect the CV joints E Inspect
200. eiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 5 The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 27 Ql 2Z4 5 mi 819793fc Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all of the tires with low pressure including those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in
201. el A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the Hazard Warning flasher switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the fan control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
202. em and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas under Safety Tips in Section 2 The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentiona
203. emains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initi
204. en checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle en STARTING AND OPERATING 313 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on
205. eneral Informa tion in this section for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring a Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for loaded it should have its own brakes and they motoring safety should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector WA
206. engers An purposes only not for passengers who should sit improperly latched seat could cause serious injury in seats and use seat belts The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING Continued e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The electric rear window defroster button is lo cated on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside rearview mirrors if equipped
207. eplace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary D 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447 H gt y 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or N Schedule 150 Months Maintenance r LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Y 14 Rotate tires M Change the engine oil and engine oil A 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter N 7 engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires C J Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped T Replace the engine air cleaner filter E J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary T Replace the spark plugs 2 7L and J Inspect the CV joints 5 7L Engines S 1 Inspect exhaust system 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid All c J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Wheel Drive AWD E J Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipp
208. eplace the engine air cleaner filter Q Replace the spark plugs 2 7L and 5 7L Engines 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid All Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Cee Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 437 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule mi a a LLULCDOOLD Change the engine oil and engin
209. er From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Ent
210. er Gap sse teesi et nea n3 ae es 387 Qil Filter M sw alh ae Shey Sak ae Saw alk ee ee a 388 Oil Filter Disposal eee 388 Oil Selection lees 387 427 Oil Synthetic x errara rata kennad Perd 388 Overtheating iex sed pe ex nb Rd 356 Temperature Gauge seci restri sat siise 173 Engine Oil Viscosity n on eese 387 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 63 Ethanol wins nd 9 Ze rd ex xd 333 Event Data Recorder less 65 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 78 336 395 Exhaust System 0 0 eee 78 394 Exterior Folding Mirrors 466 INDEX MM Exterior Lighting cm te e ey 131 Exterior Lights 0 0 0 0 000000 80 Filler Location Fuel 0000005 5 337 Filters Air Gleafer emmener e ie ace do tae wea d 389 Air Conditioning llle 262 392 Engine Oll i e iuocas e rcli hs 388 429 Engine Oil Disposal lesen 388 Flashers Hazard Warning i retinis n eme 356 Turn Signal lt i ios e ntn 80 134 174 Hlash To Pass i42 ke E e x ES 135 Flat Tire Changing resiste eR eue 357 Flooded Engine Starting lesus 271 Floor Console 4d 66 4 ban RR Rr RR 159 Huid Br k oss e000 cue nk REIS 430 Fluid Capacities vos cse EROR y 427 Fluid Leaks i5 ease um EE e ENSE 80 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 404 Brake sess kederan aa deed oboe 4 Be aoe 403 Cooling System i sese eh 397 Engine Oll 51x iuste E EE 38
211. er console contains a large storage compartment The storage compartment contains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins A slot in the top left and right side of the storage compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the compartment with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptop s cellular phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to the storage compartment for both the driver and the front passenger Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x WARNING WARNING Continued e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into To help protect against personal injury passengers position If the seatback is not securely locked into should not be seated in the rear cargo area The position the seat will not provide the proper rear cargo space is intended for load carrying stability for child seats and or pass
212. er may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display
213. ersal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and an optional power sunroof switch 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING Programming HomeLink Before You Beg
214. ervoir 2 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Coolant Pressure Cap 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L i OOO om 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as p
215. es Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to eac
216. es The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side cur tain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated The Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC
217. es operate 342 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Gross Combination Wei
218. esult in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional RKE transmit ters or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the RKE transmitter being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF elec tronics will not cause interference with this system All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal I
219. eta d as 418 Replacement Keys sxiccscesux x due recede i ers 16 Replacement Parts sere repas 384 Replacement Tires sius n Rh ps 317 Reporting Safety Defects 000 454 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 177 186 Restraint Head ce cee eee 126 Restraints Child a i444 406604 RR REG 67 Restraints Occupant 000000 41 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 372 Rotation Tires o ro 0 0 0 0 ee 321 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 79 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 80 Safety Defects Reporting 454 Safety Exhaust Gas oee es ego dore 78 Safety Information Tire 0 301 Safety Tips 6004542 ew Ae See ek ale mc Re aedis 78 Satellite Radio Antenna 04 243 Satellite Radio uconnect studios 241 247 Schedule Maintenance leen 432 Seat Belt Maintenance 0040 410 Seat Belt Reminder s aroas aa niea kae 49 Seat Belts eserine a e arna a i 41 42 79 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 48 And Pregnant Women llle 51 Child Restraint 0000 67 68 69 74 Extender si tia gee ede RI dona ge maces 52 Front Seat iis Raa e LEG Reals 42 44 INSPECHON exea Pete OE au gas Bee as 79 Operating Instructions en INDEX 475 Pretensioniers 4 2 4 iens Gis hoe ea SEGURA 49 Rear Seat i544 454 089 00 4948 bo bee eae PES 42 Remind ef s cs o44 46 e adr
220. ever sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 337 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If so equipped use the finger pull to open the door Otherwise push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Door 815afa56 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may
221. exhaust system D LJ Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary d Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped LJ Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 7L and 5 7L Engines Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t
222. ey would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal functions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunc tioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance 336 STARTING AND OPERATING M The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed a gainst you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and n
223. f the instrument panel To apply the parking brake push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal To release the parking brake push down on the parking brake pedal and then release s Parking Brake The BRAKE light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is ON NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as
224. ff the air conditioning An indicator in the button will illuminate when compressor operation is selected 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped 045605184 Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Dual Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the mode control knob on the right to AUTO and place the blower control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger temperature control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary
225. ffice e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call
226. for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle i
227. formation 18 26 117 332 General Maintenance 00 00 ee 385 Glass Clearing acea ex ba tain Ed 409 Gross Axle Weight Rating 340 343 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 340 342 GVWR ek cree eee ec RUE RR RU d ERR A 340 Hands Free Phone uconnect 89 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water estes nis ia eae pon Pea 288 Hazard Warning Flasher 4 356 Head Restraints 0 e eee eee 126 Headlight Washers 0 000000 cee 393 Headlights svi eR ERE E 422 Automatic 468 INDEX MM Bulb Replacement sess cateo aiy cee e a 419 Clean asco aa acs desea ave n r eae one hee 409 Delay i i eek esten dat P ooh made 132 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 135 Lights On Reminder 004 133 On With Wipers 000005 132 138 Passing add sr dece d dba A as 135 SWIC 3 4 ote annals bee ae tae tae es 131 Time Delay iud a esed uel takaia ae 132 Washers estere reote e dx IR arde doe 393 Heated Mirrors llle 88 Heated Seats eee tess 127 Heater 05 04004903 egea atta Dee RRETA EH 253 Heater Engine Block sosire ua aa Puatai adia 272 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 135 Hitches Trailer Towing 6 2 eee eee 344 Holder Colt 150 ok a a Siw kir ae Wear 159 Holder Cup 1 epe ae mr ea Panes 158 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 146 Hood Rele
228. g a seat while the vehicle is moving is driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could recline the seatback The passenger s seat will move up or cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be down forward or rearward properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Power Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat Use the recline control to adjust the forward or rearward position of the seatback Power Seat Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Power Seat Recline Switch 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Control Lever Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjus
229. g the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE B
230. g water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical stee
231. ge Soft Rock Soft Rck Country SRELEY Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports i L pors ports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz News News Top t opa Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped gt II e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped
232. ght Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds
233. gn standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 304 STARTING AND OPERATING M EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates th
234. h pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the
235. hains on a compact spare tire CAUTION Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Continued Continued 320 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation o
236. he FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocke
237. he ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If your veh
238. he pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 81bc4c2c 1 CANCEL ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL 2 RESUME ACCEL When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the 3 ON OFF accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 4 SET DECEL 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the system 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located O on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed control system is on To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button again The system and the indicator light will turn off Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd 4th or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode if equippe
239. he torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into second gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK e Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine e Shift into DRIVE and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diag nostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK PARK supplements the parking
240. here are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature Th
241. hild into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehic
242. hile Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has esta
243. his feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Work
244. hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the shift lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the ex haust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear 270 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and rele
245. hrough an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the
246. i Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Low Fuel Indicator Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of tr an onboard diagnostic system called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typ
247. ical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 041005513 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following System status Vehicle information warning message displays Personal settings customer programmable features Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions uconnect phone displays if equipped uconnect gps system screens if equipped Audio mode display Surround Sound Modes If Equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button FUNC TION SELECT Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions uconnect gps if
248. icle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies ee U
249. ietes 400 Radiator Cap ia cce dead anke Gane ails end 400 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 398 427 429 Corrosion Protection llle 406 Cruise Control Speed Control 141 Cruise Light 5 xou dde enr ai bate arg ERR 172 Cupholders 22222 er Rr diss 158 410 Customer Assistance 0 00000 cece eee 451 Customer Programmable Features 193 Data Recorder Event 0000000008 65 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 136 Daytime Running Lights 133 Dealer Service es xar bo ER ED GS 385 10 464 INDEX ae Deck Lid Emergency Release 41 Deck Lid Power Release 000 39 Defroster Rear Window 163 Defroster Windshield 80 254 260 Delay Intermittent Wipers 137 Diagnostic System Onboard 382 Dimmer Switch Headlight 135 Dipsticks OIL Engine uisum udis dE 385 386 Power Steering sce ch ee y en ceris 291 Disabled Vehicle Towing 374 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 400 Engine Ol Loic ee eee ee ee ds 388 Door LOCKS 4 re p RR Seg we we ors 29 Door Locks Automatic 0000008 30 Door Opener Garage 2 0 00 146 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ooo ceri cero sereias 287 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water DVD Player Video Entertainment System Electric Rear
250. ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling
251. ilers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 The following chart provides the industry standard for Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the O Standards correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Class I Light Duty 2 000 lbs 907 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on mm your vehicle 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt see note 2 7L amp 3 5L Rear Wheel Drive RWD Automatic 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 3 5L All Wheel Drive AWD amp 5 7L Automatic 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Refer to
252. ilure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt abou
253. in If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING and reverse feature as required by federal safety CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes standards This includes most garage door opener sage states CHANNELS CLEARED models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as sistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position cause serious injury or death 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to
254. in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle H
255. in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The uconnect
256. ing if Blue equipped 38 10Amp Cargo Light Satellite 42 30 Amp Front Blower Motor Red Receiver SDARS Video Pink if equipped Vehicle 43 30 Amp Rear Window Defroster Information Module if Pink equipped 44 20 Amp Amplifier if equipped 39 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if Blue Sunroof if equipped Red equipped 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses circuit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho rized dealer The cluster and the driver seat switch if equipped are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 11 The passenger seat switch if equipped is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12 The door modules the driver power window switch and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13 If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started ag
257. ing conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 308 STARTING AND OPERA
258. ing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display e During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if
259. ing with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say 3 7 4 6 t Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast an
260. ink equipped 11 Z m 6 20 Amp Fuel Pump 12 Yellow 13 7 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control Red Cluster Security Mod ule if equipped 15 20Amp Trailer Tow Brake Mod Yellow ule if equipped 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 16 27 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con 17 20Amp Cluster Red troller ORC Yellow 28 10 Amp Ignition Run 18 20Amp Selectable Power Outlet Red Yellow 29 5Amp Cluster Electronic Sta 19 10 Amp Stop Lights Orange bility Program ESP if Red equipped Powertrain 0 m Control Module PCM 71 STOP LIGHT Switch a 80 10 Amp Door Modules Power BO Red Mirrors Steering Con 23 trol Module SCM 24 31 25 32 un un 26 33 34 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 35 5 Amp Antenna Module if 40 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview Orange equipped Power Mir Orange Mirror if equipped rors Heated Seats if 36 20 Amp Hands Free Phone if equipped Switch Bank Yellow equipped Video Moni 41 10 Amp AC Heater Control tor if equipped Radio Red Headlights Tire Pres 37 15 Amp Transmission sure Monitor
261. io antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 FUSES CAUTION Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the When installing the integrated power module engine compartment This modul
262. ion 117 Folding Rear Seat If Equipped 128 Wi Voice Recognition System VR ll To Open And Close The Hood 129 IET EEE EE E E E ESTEET 131 Voice Recognition System VB ODGISBOIE acea 17 Headlight Switch gt o oo oooi 131 POTS seer situ ne eae anes i Automatic Headlights If Equipped 132 Voice Training 2k n RE ES 122 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Woei oorr ERE tte mes 122 Auto Headlights Only 132 Manual Seats If Equipped 122 Headlight Time Delay ll 132 Power Seats If Equipped 124 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 133 Power Reclining Seats If Equipped 124 Lights On Reminder 0 0 133 Lumbar Support If Equipped 126 Fog Lights If Equipped 133 Head Restraints 0050 126 Multifunction Lever 0 0 0 0 0 134 Heated Seats If Equipped 127 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 135 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Interior Lights ec ERR 135 E Windshield Wipers And Washers 137 Intermittent Wiper System 137 Mist Feature sva e e Bate e es 138 Windshield Washers 04 138 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 138 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column
263. ion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Ant
264. isk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used filter Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftg
265. ist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE
266. ith care to avoid contact with the metal edges raising the vehicle and retention teeth 8133d194 Center Cap Removal ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange while the wheel is still on the ground Lug Nut Removal Installation 1 Tighten 2 Loosen 364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 060503830 Jack Engagement Locations E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 7 Mount the spare tire NOTE For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare However when reinstalling the road tire follow the procedure under Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installa tion in place of the remaining steps in this procedure 8 Install the lug nuts with the con
267. kle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Removing Slack from Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 6 To release the belt push the
268. l knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD play
269. l laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System and ESP Electronic Stability Program All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING BAS B
270. l not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of blower preferred automatic mode preferred automatic or blower and mode preferred automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the blower control knob on the left NOTE Please read the automatic temperature control operation chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode f
271. l not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the l
272. l tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Cooling System rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently
273. l the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid es STARTING AND OPERATING 327 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Rec
274. lant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visu
275. ld Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Light
276. le All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system meets the seatback and are just visible when s you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it 4 In addition there are tether strap anchorages ai xb behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment
277. le must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergenc
278. le that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Pulling Out the Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click A belt that is buckled into the wrong buc
279. lectronic Speed Control lever in SET DECEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE CEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills WARNING NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you The automatic transmission will downshift while climb could lose control An accident could be the result ing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic necessary to maintain vehicle set speed or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so slippery it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights an optional univ
280. les e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats e Bi Level p Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow e Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Recirculation Control The mode control knob also controls the recir c culation feature You can choose Bi Level Re circulation air outlets Panel Recirculation air outlets or a mix or both while in this mode UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Normally air enters from outside the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle rapidly The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on and turn off the air conditioning When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control Press this button a second time to turn o
281. les and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status Traction stability control status Tire Pressure Monitoring System status if equipped Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
282. ll display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 332 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States 0000 KR55120123 Canada ig e ha a gere d 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 7L Engine The 2 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide
283. losed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt
284. low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order
285. ly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle SELF SEALING T
286. ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 460 INDEX MM About Your Brakes llle 292 ABS Anti Lock Brake System
287. ment may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in DRIVE position After the Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure transmission cools down it will return to normal those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles operation you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis
288. n Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play ll Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Eq tpped i eas cuca goin endorse oe deals ss Connecting The iPod Using This Feature Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons Play Mode List Or Browse Mode Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios S rr System Activation Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Satellite Antenna eee Reception Quality Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped ll Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS IP Bquipped usa c seques sa e qe ode ll uconnect studios Sirius Backseat TV It Bquipped idera vene en Ee es 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PA
289. n the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Audio Surround ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes uconnect gps Navigation If Equipped uconnect gps Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn by Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a
290. n the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride STARTING AND OPERATING 321 EV ES c Ec MES a 055703771 Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed 322 STARTING AND OPERATING M TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a
291. n without spin ning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn OFF the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability Program or Traction Control System in Sec tion 5 ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 CAUTION WARNING e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage age or failure A tire could explode and injure some may result one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and don t let may lead to transmission overheating and failure anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the It can also damage the tires Do not spin the speed wheels above 35 mph 55 km h 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the rear wheels on
292. ne Light Malfunction Indicator Light 383 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 78 Checks Safety iod reve MEER RE n es 78 Child Restraint llle 67 69 72 74 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 71 72 Child Safety Locks 2 0 0 6 ee eee eee 33 Clean Air Gasoline leen 333 Cleaning Wheel oui redu UE are ee aa A 408 Windshield Wiper Blades en INDEX 463 Climate Control eesse csv see eee eee eee vied 253 Clock i2 nga sede RES RR 199 213 216 226 Com Holder i122 sh rU had 159 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 252 Compact Spare Tire i e x Rae 313 COMPASS x cione die d ed aned ARR ea 190 Compass Calibration h smska 191 Compass Variance s rece ere a n 191 Computer Trip Travel iliis 187 Connector WG ae openers eat oe ite ea ead quies d 236 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 236 Console Floor co cerpanie ee eee 159 Console Overhead 0000000 cee eee 145 Contract Service ee ee 453 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 400 Cooling System 6 ee 397 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 399 Coolant Capacity seset eatrini ee eee ee 427 Coolant Level 0 0 0 0 00 e eae 397 401 Disposal of Used Coolant 400 Drain Flush and Refill 398 Inspection ss ters secs nde RR tessi 401 Points to Remember 000 0000s 401 Pressure Cap xum des e dawa d
293. negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 WARNING Continued e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information Continued 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid r
294. ng and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard Va SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OC NEVER EXCEED XXX P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum load
295. ng column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the transmission is in REVERSE or when the speed control is on CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to t
296. nimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for filter replacement instructions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel 4 or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS
297. not inflate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for six to eight seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up 0 Y 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 ms This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your ey
298. nt seat occupants Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available to add more sur round audio if desired uconnect studios SIRIUS BACKSEAT Tv IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio SIRIUS Back seat TV offers three video channels for family enter tainment directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES RER Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de tailed operating instructions 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment e Adiagonal 7 in 17 8 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center console armrest The screen features brightness control for optimum day time and nighttime viewing 8199815e Opening the Rear Seat VESTM ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 e The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest e The radio and DVD player co
299. ntal additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine
300. ntenance Schedule Lin 432 Maintenance Sunroof 0 00000 ee 155 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 183 383 Manual Service 0 0 llle 455 Map Reading Lights 135 145 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 403 Methanol Mini Trip Computer MitfOIS caspe 3 eph Automatic Dimming Electric Powered Electric Remote Exterior Folding Heated Outside Rearview Vanity 3 i eire ea Modifications Alterations Vehicle Monitor Tire Pressure System Multi Function Control Lever New Vehicle Break In Period Mopar Parts MTBE ETBE 471 472 INDEX M Occupant Restraints 0 0 000 e ee eee 41 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 332 429 Odometer 225a 4 ae eS a ee eae 172 177 ji Cms 172 177 Oil Change Indicator 0 177 186 Oil Change Indicator Reset 177 186 Oily Engines esce ie S neptis ere drca 385 429 Capacity e amp ssssscsk ee iv E RE RU eed ape 427 Change Interval esse ras arassa nias 177 186 386 Checking 2 gcse said a pera ie e aes 385 386 DipsS ck gt gurie vuota tfe reins Aer 385 386 Disposal iiis Sita a BE nd 388 Filler accu d44 08aSa09 6 2h aNege 4 SUR es 388 429 Filter Disposal s sus 0 0 0 0 0 000000 ee 388 Identification Logo 6 eee 387 Materials Added to
301. ntification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the
302. ntrols allow front seat to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers e A battery powered infrared remote control snaps into a molded compartment in the center console armrest upper storage bin 8199818b VES Video Screen NOTE Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been raised to its viewing position 81abfb61 VES Remote Control 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to your Vehicle Entertainment System VES Users Manual for detailed operating instruc tions REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions 045105297 Remote Sound System Controls UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information when the AUDIO MODE button is
303. nue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber T
304. ocks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Lock Doors Au tomatically at 15 mph 24 km h under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the BS doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Door
305. of is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to
306. oke With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym bol will display until the trunk is closed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Trunk Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers the front airbags for both the driver and front passenger the optional supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window and the optional supplemental front seat mounted side airbags If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or y
307. ommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may
308. on prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party wil
309. ons do not currently broadcast Music Type information 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types alae ese Display Poraa Tyne 16 Digit cu e Personality Ferny Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined iei i DIE GNIS Religious Music Rel Musc ult Hits PEE Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft caes ollege Soft Rock Soft Rck Country SRELEY Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports i L pors ports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz News News Top t M Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours an
310. options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 When tow ing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade WARNING atGonbnued When parking apply the parking brake on the tow Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in and it will not shift during travel When trailering PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to e GCWR must not be exceeded control You could lose control of your vehicle and e Total weight must be distributed between the tow have an accident vehicle and the trailer such that the following four f ratings are not exceeded e
311. or 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or A C on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated A C on or off 81341de7 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Defrost Qv Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Defrost Floor Ge Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets locat
312. or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk
313. order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning T lr m I If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid E rani The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the TT hs EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for LAC Sa three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road ti
314. osition The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 flashes when the TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe at tentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has two available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired
315. ossible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II
316. oth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 CLIMATE CONTROLS Blower Control The air conditioning and heating system is designed to The rotary knob on the left controls the make you comfortable in all types of weather de blower The control has an OFF posi tion and four speed settings The blower will remain on until the con trol is turne
317. ou can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING WARNING Continued e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehic
318. ower from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs sae only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console Front Seat Cupholders es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows Rear Seat Cupholders STORAGE
319. owest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE
320. porarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The Trip Functions mode displays the following e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history informa tion will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy acco
321. properly 6 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 7 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 8 If your vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not lean against the door as the airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 9 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has supplemental side curtain air bags and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following
322. r training button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is button The name and color of the button may vary by NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer door NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 3 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are
323. r left D D while in the DRIVE position The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on demand All Wheel Drive AWD system which makes available opti mum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary To maximize fuel economy your AWD vehicle automati cally defaults to Rear Wheel Drive RWD when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction the es STARTING AND OPERATING 287 vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera ture wheel slip or other predetermined conditions there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs AWD can also be manually se lected by moving the shift lever into the Autostick mode or activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of time NOTE If the t CASE or SERVICE AWD SYSTEM warning message appears after engine start up or during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual
324. r steering and transmission and add as needed M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following At Each Oil Change pages for the required maintenance intervals e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Cee Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 1
325. r you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and 272 STARTING AND OPERATING M release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not obse
326. rake Assist System This system complements the ABS by optimizing the The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application ABS cannot prevent accidents including those re and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on can help reduce braking distances very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability 208 STARTING AND OPERATING ME W
327. rake when leaving the vehicle in this range apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage 278 STARTING AND OPERATING M The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position REVERSE Use REVERSE for moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE NEUTRAL The engine may be started in this range CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis sion damage WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident D Overdrive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 shifts and the best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shif
328. rding to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting
329. re that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires en STARTING AND OPERATING 331 NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC wi
330. re when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Folding Rear Seat If Equipped On some models the rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folding Rear Seats When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 TS 70 0058 180 cLosE THE Hoon WARNING Two latches must be released to open the hood e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint sy
331. re will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re moved 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See alarm Opening a door with the security alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm To Unlatch the Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Ala
332. red button on the buckle 1 WARNUNGI The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be allow the belt to retract fully EB at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts sible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the
333. ressures 311 TCS Traction Control System 297 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 312 BAS Brake Assist System sess 297 Radial Ply Tires 0 313 ESP Electronic Stability Program 298 COIBace Spare DIG a usas n Synchronizing ESP 0 00 eee ee 300 Patatod Use Spare HE EQIUDDU uires 9H en STARTING AND OPERATING 267 Tire Spinning cese atis we dare pets 315 W Fuel Requirements css ra SEXE 332 Tread Wear Indicators 316 2 1 BN GING aren ikat cere ed iR 332 Life Of Tire 22i ke edes 316 3 5L And 5 7L Engines sesa c s tresa riss 332 Replacement Tires 00040 317 Reformulated Gasoline 333 ll Self Sealing Tires If Equipped 318 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends MiTire Chains 0 000000 319 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles MSnow Tires 200 beta Rm Rh 320 MMT In Gasoline cso csere seieesrestas Wi Tire Rotation Recommendations 321 Materials Added To Fuel H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 322 Fuel System Cautions Base System ase necem ELA set 324 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 336 Premium System If Equipped 327 Bb Adding Fuel serceru fewest res 4 oceans 337 General Information
334. ring capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are 292 STARTING AND OPERATING M apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rize
335. rm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the RKE transmitter Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 021305151 Battery Replacement 1 Battery Ac
336. rol knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types alae eed Display Pl stam Tyne 16 Digit sri Personality Eersntty Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined iei i DIE NORIS Religious Music Rel Musc ult Hits PEE Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College olle
337. rophone uy for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button e Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellular ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to gi
338. rved e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL General Information into any forward gear when the engine is above The automatic transmission selects individual gears au idle speed tomatically dependent upon Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style 274 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e f there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Trans mission engage
339. ry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the
340. s Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Driver Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped Power Mirrors Heated Power Mirrors If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 88 connect phone If Equipped 89 Operation yay dk So PGs at dos a beds 91 Phone Call Features 99 uconnect phone Features 102 Advanced Phone Connectivity 107 Things You Should Know About Your uconn ct PHONE xe wp elk es E 108 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se General Informat
341. s defrosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 2 7L 379 Bl Engine Compartment 3 5L 380 Bl Engine Compartment 5 7L 381 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 382 Loose Fuel Fillr Cap 382 i Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs iy r ein acs e eas cds A aed 383 Bl Replacement Parts 0000 384 W Dealer Service 1 ee 385 Bl Maintenance Procedures 08 385 Bngine Oil s aureo e deep ees 385 Engine Oil Filter ssr erus llle Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance A C Air Filter 2 eee ee ee Body Lubrication 0 392 Windshield Wiper Blades 393 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Washers lesen 393 Exhaust System 0 ee eee eee 394 Cooling System scure 6 ee pintes 397 Brake SYSteml c 2 suis debe oe E che Res 402 Automatic Transmission 404 All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 405 Appearance Care And Protection From COETOSIONG 32453 Red Sots cal a Mapas er ends Roa 406
342. s equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor 324 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning ofa tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the
343. s the horn will pulse the headlights will flash the park lights will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm the System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro cess If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm
344. s on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the valet key or similar object into the child lock control and pull it upward NOTE For valet key information refer to A Word About Your Keys in this section Child Lock Control 3 Repeat
345. s sesers bcuseae b d en 320 Spare lue saosa eosti suede Varese 358 SPINNING stra gueys uad decided Ed RUE 315 40 478 INDEX aaa Trailer Towing llle 350 Tread Wear Indicators 000 316 To Open Hood isse Rr RES o nE T ER 129 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 347 Torque Converter Clutch 0 280 TOWING PSI 342 24 Hour Towing Assistance ls 103 Behind a Motor Home 354 Disabled Vehicle seb RES 374 Guide erede d rab ed wa Cae n t 346 Recreational 5 oru d RR Rd 354 Weight 235229242 e E LEE OPES 346 Towing Assistance 0 eee eee 103 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 354 Traction Control 1 ee 297 Trailer TOWING ecce eR RR RR 342 Cooling System Tips less 354 Hitches i cauce edere RE ERROR a 344 Minimum Requirements 4 348 IPS 0 cap aye agit sate nal Pe eee be oe a tens 353 Trailer and Tongue Weight 347 WHS icin serbe tothe aaah RES SES 351 Trailer Towing Guide 000 346 Trailer Weight i sese Res eR RR ed 346 Transfer Case se e eme ds 405 II seai sca ede al os Molen Gerd ah aide Parte al 405 430 Maintenance 2i dw eSttined oe t EY 406 TransmissiOD 1 33 ah aah Se ar ak oS Aa e 404 Automatic ecce iek areek 273 276 282 404 Iun Em 430 Range Indicator 005 277 282 iun re yea eae ead Ee 273 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry
346. s the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 818c9c32 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can also signal a lane change by moving the multifunction lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent Releasing the multi function lever at the detent will provide three flashes If either indicator has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the multifunction lever is moved see your autho rized dealer for service NOTE A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
347. s to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED 046405698 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel surround sound from any stereo audio source A new feature of the Kicker audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the fro
348. sc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forwar
349. se damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to following this warning could result in an accident uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Ide
350. selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e
351. selects the left mirror right mirror or off position s Power Mirror Control After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Heated Power Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in this Section for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Illuminated Vanity Mirror uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated uconnect phone Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for uconnect phone operating instruc tions for these radios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted thro
352. sing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode
353. sion Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position and the brake pedal must be depressed from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmis sion shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Over Temperature Mode There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move The transmission electronics constantly monitor the the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access normal operating temperature the transmission will the override remove the rubber tray from the storage bin change the way it shifts to help control the condition 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate Interlock Manual Override To activate the override first insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position Then press the pink colored tab through the access port with a small flat blade screwdriver
354. speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR button and say Help or Main Menu es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Commands In this mode you can say the following commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported e Disc to switch to the disc mode PRO ROO ES active e Memo to switch to the memo recorder 3 Changing the Volume e Radio to switch to the radio mode e System Setup to switch to system setup Ey Siero dialogue hy pressing Hacc VR Putian Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium 2 Say a command e g Help Wave If Equipped 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Io Switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni y y say 5 l tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting e Frequency to change the frequency is diff han th i for NBOSCOBIOren Wan be anio SO e Next Station to select the next station Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Previous S
355. speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Proce dures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust g
356. spraying water from a garden When working near the fadiaton cooling tan dise hose vertically down the face of the condenser connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ture controlled and can start at any time the ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection ignition switch is in the ON position at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for You or others can be badly burned by hot engine leaks coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery anaes bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the
357. ssible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting between the five available gears When you wish to engage Autostick simply move the shift lever to the right o
358. stalling an infant or child restraint e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Seat belts with an automatic locking retra
359. sted one Enter Name 4st Confirmation at a time Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Prompts Toggle List Phones Confirmation Prompts on off Say 4 digt System Lists pin code Phones Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing New phone Select a language will English Espanol temporarily or Francais override phone List Phones priorities Towing Assistance Select phone to be deleted Phone Deleted System System Lists confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais ad
360. steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brak
361. stem Hood Release Lever 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 031305159 Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 LIGHTS Headlight Switch x The headlight switch is located on the left side of N the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
362. system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery fa
363. t To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Fluid Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve
364. t even with the HEADLIGHT switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself If a headlight bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly See your au thorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlights when the headlights are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Backup Light Side Marker Light Tail Turn Light 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the and Tail Stop Light tail light assembly 1 Open the Trunk 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light 6 Disconnect the electrical connector assembly 812c4b54 7 Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to 3 Pull back the trunk liner access the bulbs 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly 818ec611 2 Side Marker Light Bulb 818ec652 1 Backup Light Bulb 3 Tail Turn Light Bulb 818ec69d MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 818ec6ac 4 Tail Stop Light Bulb 9 Disconnect the bulb from the socket
365. t the restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise it pull upward on the head restraint To lower it press the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint 81b7959a Adjustable Head Restraint es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Heated Seats If Equipped Press the switch once to select High level heat This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off Two indica tors will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off The controls for each front seat are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel If High level heating is selected the system will auto matically switch to the Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the Low level setting also turns off automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes Front Heated Seat Switch 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise ca
366. t your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 2 7L and 3 5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is
367. tart request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not Manul Doar LOCKS inside the vehicle before closing the door To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the WARNING door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and de
368. tation to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Main Menu to switch to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new
369. temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency en STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest po
370. ter Button Base Cluster The word TRIP will appear when this button is pressed Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles km A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it 3 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light If Equipped Y 5 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging s
371. ter what the speed Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck 316 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regular
372. the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with 9 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms
373. the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call W
374. through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to pl
375. ting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers NOTE e Ifthe vehicle is started in cold temperatures shifts into Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera ture Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section e If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en gage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The transmis sion will operate normally in 1st 2nd and 3rd while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis tress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than in other gear range selections 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTI
376. tions of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate shpa 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 Bieta 332 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 ig oie d an 24 2205 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song titl
377. to lift the pus vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire 81344fb9 Opening The Access Panel NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire access the jack p 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 812c5587 2 81b31802 Spare Tire Fastener Jack Fastener 4 Remove the spare tire WARNING 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack ry 5 1e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Preparations For Jacking 6 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas 7 Set the parking brake 8 Place the shift lever into PARK 9 Turn OFF the ignition 10 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 11 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
378. to the lower anchorage and a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE WARNI e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the NING opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in Improper installation of a child restraint to the the strap LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when in
379. ts Instrument Cluster Description 172 Warnings and Cautions 00 0 6 Warranty Information 05 454 Washer Adding Fluid 004 393 Washers Windshield 137 138 393 Washing Vehicle 0 0 0 0 cece 407 480 INDEX MM Water Windshield Defroster 80 254 260 Driving Through 0 000040 288 Windshield Washers ss 137 138 Wheel and Wheel Trim Less 408 BMW 220 rete RARE E ae Sd 393 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 408 Windshield Wiper Blades 393 Wind Buffeting ess ena wth ad ae 39 154 Windshield Wipers 0 0 0 0 0000s ee uee 137 Window Airbag Side Curtain 54 60 Wiper Blade Replacement 393 Window Fogging ccc asad eG ada ge Rar 262 Wiper Delay db ho acd Re E ae 137 AMIBOOWS seeria Fe GA go PRU pete AS 35 Wipers Intermittent 2 bp E enes 137 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to
380. ture Control Automatic ATC 256 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 173 357 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 71 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tilt Steering Column 04 139 Time Delay Headlight 132 Tire and Loading Information Placard 306 Tire Identification Number TIN 305 Tire Markings i24 26300 RR REA EY 301 Tire Safety Information 004 301 ju ET 80 310 457 Aging Life of Tires 0 0 0 00 0 e eens 316 Ait Pressure ia 22 cet ca ee a eee as 310 Chains eseiss sssri des pue REP dag SS 319 Changing eleme RE s 357 360 Compact Spare s issa ova sdb ace ES 313 Flat Changing beeen m m 357 General Information 0040 310 High Speedi sxc csigt sence baw te REG 312 Inflation Pressures 0000000005 311 Jacking usce edo SU act REOR acta Mra ROS CR 360 Life of Tires penis eanes e 8 See dane eh PS aRar 316 Load Capacity 6 232 2s 6 sha whale eg dale elk a gers 306 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 322 Pressure Warning Light 180 Quality Grading i ies Eee nets 457 Radial gensere mananari awards ack der d 313 Replacement 2246 41ii00 235 4404 PEE 317 Rotan tet dl diets si ae mii p E 4 dala 321 Safety Saha gts eae a Wie ee ee dose 301 310 Self Sealing iud dig wae RUD ds ee 318 D PEPPER 303 Snow Tire
381. ubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se quarter window equipped with the rad
382. ucG HE bab eee EG 176 Untwisting Procedure 005 48 SOAS Geetha RUE NUUS ea he ar eee ae 122 Adjustment ic du aes betwee ea cds 122 Head Restraints llllllllesn 126 Heated 0 04 Sint duc eoe db datas eae qu 127 Height Adjustment seres sanansa stani amti 124 Lumbar Support 222652 602066 coe eisi 126 lv CT 124 Rear Folding 443425 204652382 e RR 128 Reclining 22sszasedexerewsdpuebePeELER 124 Seatback Release llle 128 Til ng o6sxeiccb Y x9 eka Re E DE 124 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 398 429 Selection of Oll seme Bi eee he Es 387 pelf Sealing ites pay dung eme Rea ees ds 318 Sentry Key Immobilizer 00 15 Sentry Key Programming 00 17 Sentry Key Replacement Service Assistance Service Contaci cvs cedo ERA AERES 453 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator sse Service Manuals Setting the Clock Settings Personal xo Rer RS Shif ng uides Edge ee var Hau ad Automatic Transmission Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage Shoulder Belts 0 0 0 eee eee eee Side Airbag cei ci ce ae aes Side Curtain Window Airbag Signals Turn Sirius Backseat TV uconnect studios Slippery Surfaces Driving On 476 INDEX ae Snow Chains Tire Chains 319 SNOW Wires cc ha akby HEE ES pede eR Ses 320 Sound System Kicker og
383. ugh your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone NOTE e The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Version 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for supported phones For uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e www jeep com uconnect or call 1 877 855 8400 uconnect allows you to transfer calls between the sys tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the mic
384. ugs 3 5L Engines m Replace the timing belt 3 5L Engine J Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 44 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance 4 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Q Rotate tires 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil JJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary O O C M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445 D D D D D D O D C O C C LE 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter
385. urity Alarm is armed 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunct
386. utton 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the learn button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules
387. utton REU Radio Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channel
388. uttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass ton
389. ving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel
390. visor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and o
391. when prompted by uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Manual Seats If Equipped Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured er Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the Adjustin
392. will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new integrated key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte grated key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signal
393. with this feature Seat belts that have the Automatic Locking mode feature have a distinctive label on the webbing Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will here a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emer gency Locking mode Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provid
394. y ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VE
395. ys remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni tion Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera tion Therefore only RKE transmitters that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter to start the engine Either of these conditions will r
396. ystem Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check A when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 8 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera WARNING ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or

Dodge 2008 Ram 1500 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents